2017 FIAT 500L Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2017-500l

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 370 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

OWNER’S MANUAL
2017
2017 FIAT® 500L
First Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
17BF-126-AA
FIAT® 500L
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1INTRODUCTION ...............................................................3
2THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................71
4UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . .....................................129
5STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................215
6WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES .................................................273
7MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE ..................................................297
8MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................343
9IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . ..........................................349
10 INDEX .....................................................................355
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵INTRODUCTION .......................4
䡵HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .............4
䡵WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS .............6
䡵VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER .......6
䡵VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . .7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be
assured that it represents precision workmanship, dis-
tinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of
your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Informa-
tion, and various customer-oriented documents. Please
take the time to read these publications carefully. Fol-
lowing the instructions and recommendations in this
manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of
your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services
that FCA US LLC offers to its customers:
•The Warranty with terms and conditions for main-
taining its validity
•The range of additional services available to FCA US
LLC customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient refer-
encing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your autho-
rized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-
trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which
section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
4 INTRODUCTION
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or through-
out this Owner’s Manual:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAU-
TIONS against procedures that could result in damage
to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s
Manual, you may miss important information. Observe
all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on
the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears
engraved on the right front floor pan under the passen-
ger seat, on an adhesive label applied to the right door
opening on the B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and
title.
Vehicle Identification Number
Stamped VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ............11
▫Ignition Switch .......................11
▫Locking Doors With A Key...............12
▫Key-In-Ignition Reminder ...............13
䡵SENTRY KEY .........................13
▫Replacement Keys ....................13
▫General Information ...................14
䡵VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM .............14
▫To Arm The System ...................14
▫To Disarm The System..................15
▫Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device)
— If Equipped .......................15
䡵REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY ...............16
▫To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate .........16
▫To Lock The Doors And Liftgate...........17
▫Programming Additional Key Fobs .........17
▫Request For Additional Remote Controls .....17
▫Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control ............................17
▫General Information ...................18
䡵DOOR LOCKS ........................18
▫Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open . .20
▫Auto — Relocking (Only For Rear Doors) ....20
▫Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors .............................20
▫To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System .....................20
䡵POWER WINDOWS ....................21
▫Power Window Switches ................21
2
▫Wind Buffeting ......................23
䡵LIFTGATE ...........................23
▫Liftgate Emergency Release ..............24
䡵OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .........25
▫Occupant Restraint Systems Features .......25
▫Important Safety Precautions .............25
▫Seat Belt Systems .....................26
▫Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).......35
▫Child Restraints ......................48
▫Transporting Pets .....................64
䡵ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .64
䡵SAFETY TIPS .........................65
▫Transporting Passengers.................65
▫Exhaust Gas .........................66
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................66
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................68
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob contains an
integrated key. To use the mechanical key simply push
the mechanical key release button.
NOTE: The authorized dealer that sold you your ve-
hicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks.
These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys
from your authorized dealer.
Ignition Switch
The ignition switch can be turned to three different
positions:
•STOP: engine off, key can be removed. Some electri-
cal devices (e.g. sound system, central door locking
system, etc.) can operate.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
key can be removed.
•AVV: engine start-up.
•MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are
enabled.
The ignition switch is fitted with a safety system that
requires the ignition key to be turned back to STOP if
the engine does not start, before the starting operation
can be repeated.
Mechanical Key Release Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
WARNING!
•Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK, apply the parking
break, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always re-
move the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the right.
Ignition Switch
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 3 — AVV (START)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK
sounds a signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Opera-
tion is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is turned
to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it indicates that
there is a problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
•Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
•The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some aftermarket remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. When
having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security
alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the
following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the vehicle security light on the instrument panel
will flash.
To Arm The System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the Central Lock/Unlock
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry key fob and close
all doors.
3. The horn will sound and the vehicle security light in
the instrument cluster will switch on for approxi-
mately three seconds. This shows that the vehicle
security alarm is arming. During this period, if a
door is opened, the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN, or the power door locks are unlocked in
any manner, the vehicle security alarm will auto-
matically disarm. After approximately three seconds,
the vehicle security light will flash. This shows that
the vehicle security alarm is fully armed.
The activation of the vehicle security alarm is followed
by a self-diagnosis stage. If a fault is detected during the
self-diagnosis stage, the horn will sound a second time.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the horn sounds a second time, check that all doors,
hood and liftgate are closed correctly, then rearm the
system.
If the vehicle security alarm sounds the horn a second
time even when all doors, hood and liftgate are cor-
rectly closed, a fault has occurred in the operation of the
system. Contact your authorized dealer.
To Disarm The System
Push unlock on the key fob, or insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The vehicle security alarm will not disarm when
the metal insert of the key is used on a single door lock
cylinder.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
vehicle security alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the key
fob, once the vehicle security alarm is armed, when you
pull the door handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, push the unlock button on the key fob to disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device)
— If Equipped
This safety device prevents the operation of the interior
door handles and the door locking/unlocking button.
It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the
passenger compartment, serving as an obstacle to
break-in attempts (e.g. broken window).
We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock device
each time you park your car.
Safe Lock Device Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Activating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors by
quickly double-pushing the lock button on the key fob.
The direction indicators flash three times and the LED
above the button flashes to indicate that the Safe Lock
device has been activated. If one or more of the doors
are not closed correctly, the Safe Lock device will not
activate, preventing a person from getting stuck inside
the passenger compartment by entering the car
through, and then closing, the open door.
Deactivating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically:
1. By pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
2. By turning the ignition key to the MAR position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a handheld Remote Keyless Entry key fob. The
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five sec-
onds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob With Mechanical Key
Release Button
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock
all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Refer to “Sentry Key” in this section for further infor-
mation.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
The system can recognize up to eight remote controls.
Should a new remote control be necessary, go to an
authorized dealer, taking an ID document and the car
ownership documents.
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
Key Fob Components
1 — Mechanical Key
2 — Mechanical Key Release Button
3 — Battery
4 — Battery Case
5—Screw
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
1. Push mechanical release button to open the mechani-
cal key.
2. Turn the screw to unlock using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case and replace the battery
making sure that polarities are correct.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key and lock it
turning the screw to lock.
NOTE: Used batteries should be properly disposed of
as specified by law, see your authorized dealer for
assistance needed.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
Push the central lock/unlock button located on the
instrument panel, in the switch bank below the radio.
The button has an LED that indicates whether the doors
are locked or unlocked.
•LED ON: Doors locked. Pushing the central lock/
unlock button once will unlock all doors. The LED
will switch off once the doors are unlocked.
•LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Pushing the central lock/
unlock button once will lock all doors. The LED will
switch on once the doors are locked.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Once the doors have been locked with the key fob, it
will no longer be possible to unlock them by pushing
central lock/unlock button.
NOTE:
With central locking active (LED ON), opening
one of the front doors, it is possible to perform a central
unlocking (LED OFF). With central locking active (LED
ON), in order to open one of the rear passenger doors, it
is necessary pulling the internal door handle twice. With
one of the rear door open (LED OFF), the unlocking is
performed only for that door, not for all the vehicle.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to
the first detent. If the rear doors are locked, you must
pull the door handle once to unlock the door and pull
the door handle a second time to open the door.
WARNING!
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
•For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the automatic transmission into
PARK, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
Central Lock/Unlock Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always re-
move the key from the ignition and lock all of the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open
It is possible to lock the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry, internal button, or external key fob. The
vehicle can also be locked if one or more doors are open.
At lock command request, LED is switched ON. At
closing of the last door, the vehicle maintains the central
locking status if key is not inserted in Ignition Device,
otherwise the vehicle will be unlocked and the LED will
be switched OFF.
NOTE: If the key is not inserted in the ignition switch,
but is inside the vehicle, the system does not recognize
the presence of the key and after the closing of last door,
the vehicle remains locked.
Auto — Relocking (Only For Rear Doors)
With the vehicle locked and all doors closed (LED ON),
if a passenger opens one of the rear doors (LED OFF), as
soon as the door is closed, it will be locked again (LED
ON).
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the key into the lock and rotate
clockwise to the lock position or counter clockwise to
unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks
are engaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, unlock
the doors using the central unlock button, roll down the
window and open the door using the exterior handle.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door, which operate the front passenger
window and a single switch on each rear door that
operates the rear passenger door window. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The power window switches will remain active
for up to three minutes after the ignition switch is
cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
Power Switch Panel
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Window Switches
2 — Window Lockout Switch
3 — Driver And Passenger Rear Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not let children play with power windows. Do
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Auto-Down
The window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch for approximately one second,
release, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Pull the window switch for approximately one second,
release and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window during an Auto-Up operation, push
or pull again the window switch.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE:
•If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-
Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
•Any impact due to rough road conditions may trig-
ger the Auto-Reverse function unexpectedly during
Auto-Closure. If this happens, pull the switch and
hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Auto-Up Feature
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down to open the window
completely and continue to hold the switch down for
an additional two seconds after the window is fully
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof open-
ing to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate the
central locking button located on the instrument panel
below the radio.
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate electronic release
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Electronic Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
WARNING!
•Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Liftgate Emergency Release
As a security measure, a liftgate emergency release is
built into the liftgate latching mechanism. To access the
liftgate emergency release, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear headrests and fold down the seats
completely.
2. Take the screwdriver from the tool box supplied.
3. With the screwdriver, remove the tab of yellow
color (1).
4. Introduce the screwdriver into the seat (2) in order to
trigger the release tab of the trunk (follow the
direction arrow to open).
Liftgate Emergency Release
1 — Yellow Tab Location
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
•Seat Belt Systems
•Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
•Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in
this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information) should be secured in
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
Liftgate Emergency Release
2 — Release Tab
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to
the “If You Need Consumer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
WARNING!
•NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of
it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD
can occur.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
•A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position, a
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
when the ignition switch is first in the AVV/START or
MAR/ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning se-
quence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light
and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other
items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or
when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your au-
thorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
•In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
•Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions
to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
•Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
•A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
•A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly.
In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure
the seat belt is flat against your body, without
twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
•A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly caus-
ing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt
into the buckle nearest you.
•A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING! (Continued)
•A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dan-
gerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces
of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and
neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can
cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.
•A shoulder belt placed behind you will not pro-
tect you from injury during a collision. You are
more likely to hit your head in a collision if you
do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
•A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. In-
spect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretension-
ing devices that are designed to remove slack from the
seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretension-
ers work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system. For additional information, refer to “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the
“Child Restraints” section of this manual. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each seating
position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is in-
stalled in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
•Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
•Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to re-
strain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraints that have a har-
ness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wir-
ing associated with the electrical Air Bag System Com-
ponents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the fol-
lowing Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•Air Bag Warning Light
•Steering Wheel and Column
•Instrument Panel
•Knee Impact Bolsters
•Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•Supplemental Side Air Bags
•Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•Front and Side Impact Sensors
•Seat Belt Pretensioners
•Seat Track Position Sensors
•Seat Belt Buckle Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-
tronic parts of the air bag system whenever
the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the igni-
tion switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if
the light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal-
function is detected that could affect the air bag system.
The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunc-
tion. While the air bag system is designed to be main-
tenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
•The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
•The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
•The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condi-
tion the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if
it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition,
a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immedi-
ately. For additional information regarding the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
Front Air Bag Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3—
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING!
•Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel
or instrument panel.
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of
collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC), which may receive information from the
front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects
whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
WARNING!
•No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
•Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
(Continued)
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air bag
cushions are designed to open only when the air
bags are inflating.
•Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air
bags.
WARNING!
•Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts, preten-
sioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air
bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIR-
BAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the trim out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-
dren are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
WARNING!
•Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the deployment of the SABICs.
The trim covering above the side windows where
the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
•In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts
or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do
not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or
not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
•Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including
children, should never lean on or sleep against
the door, side windows, or area where the side air
bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
•Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from
an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protec-
tion from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be prop-
erly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
(Continued)
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
•Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely in-
jured or killed.
•Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side im-
pacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air
bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment
of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the
Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing sys-
tem will also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both
sides of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed be-
low:
Air Bag System Components
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•Air Bag Warning Light
•Steering Wheel and Column
•Instrument Panel
•Knee Impact Bolsters
•Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•Supplemental Side Air Bags
•Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•Front and Side Impact Sensors
•Seat Belt Pretensioners
•Seat Track Position Sensors
•Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
•The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air
bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to
friction rope burns or those you might get sliding
along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not
permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
or if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
•As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s
instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can-
not protect you in another collision. Have the air
bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt
retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Re-
straint Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
•After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will
determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System perform the following functions:
•Cut off fuel to the engine.
•Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
or until the hazard light button is pressed. The
hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the
hazard light button.
•Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
•Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the
ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Care-
fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK. (Turn Sig-
nal Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
5. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS
9. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal
switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed
in Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
12. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire
sequence needs to be
completed within one
minute or sequence will
need to be repeated).
System is now reset and
the engine may be
started.
Turn hazard flashers
OFF (Manually)
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-
ture, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
•Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
•These data can help provide a better understanding
of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries
occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired dur-
ing a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
crash statistics, children are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Own-
er’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
•Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Con-
vertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Re-
straints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent
over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat
are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
•
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
•When your child restraint is not in use, secure it
in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave
it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
accident, it could strike the occupants or seat-
backs and cause serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle.
If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat
belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is
latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on
the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under
an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may
result in serious injury or death. A child must
always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of
the seat belt correctly.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint an-
chorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are used
to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with
the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint.
Please see the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints
In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages
Per Seating Position)
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH anchorage system once the com-
bined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower an-
chorages?
No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to in-
stall a child seat in the center seating posi-
tion.
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All may be removed.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Lower Anchorages
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of
the seat, near the floor.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the
lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to
the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at
the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way
to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Upper Tether Anchorages
Tether Anchorage Routing Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
•Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position.
•Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. Please refer to
“Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Re-
straint System” for typical installation instruc-
tions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint
and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt
interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
WARNING!
•Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
•Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
•Improper installation or failure to properly secure
a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-
tions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
The seat belts in the rear passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint
Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
•ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a for-
ward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes All may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•Improper installation or failure to properly secure
a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-
tions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need
to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward
and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move
it to its rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-
bing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of
approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no
top tether anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where pos-
sible, route the tether strap under the head restraint
and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the
head restraint and pass the tether strap around the
outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
•An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet har-
nesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades,
refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level
with the engine oil indicator often during the break in
period. Add oil as required.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-
less. Breathing it can make you unconscious and
can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
(CO), follow these safety tips:
•Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all win-
dows are closed and the climate control BLOWER
switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
recirculation mode.
•If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine ex-
haust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment.
In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as
required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question
regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is
first placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If
the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” for further
information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners
may cause your floor mat to interfere with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss
of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
•ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your
floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat
over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured
using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
•ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING! (Continued)
•ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be
properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a
floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
•ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interference,
with the vehicle properly parked with the engine
off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and
the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interfer-
ence. If your floor mat interferes with the opera-
tion of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place
the floor mat in your trunk.
•ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
•ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals.
•If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
•It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and
bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pres-
sure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if
gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering
fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected.
The cause should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵MIRRORS ...........................74
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror ...............74
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . .74
▫Conversation Mirror — If Equipped ........75
▫Power Mirrors .......................76
▫Folding Mirrors.......................76
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........76
▫Sun Visors ..........................77
䡵SEATS...............................78
▫Front Seats ..........................78
▫Rear Seats ..........................81
▫Head Restraints ......................85
䡵OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD ......88
䡵LIGHTS .............................89
▫Multifunction Lever....................89
▫Headlights ..........................90
▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....90
▫High Beams .........................91
▫Flash-To-Pass ........................91
▫Parking Lights .......................91
▫Turn Signals .........................91
▫Lane Change Assist ...................91
▫Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay.........91
▫Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ..........92
▫Interior Lights .......................92
䡵WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .....94
▫Front Windshield Wiper Operation .........95
▫Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............96
3
䡵TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .98
䡵SPEED CONTROL .....................98
▫To Activate ..........................99
▫To Set A Desired Speed .................99
▫To Deactivate .......................100
▫To Resume Speed ....................100
▫To Vary The Speed Setting ..............100
▫To Accelerate For Passing ..............101
䡵REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .......102
▫Rear Park Assist Sensors ...............102
▫Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts ..........102
▫Failure Indications ....................104
▫Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System ......104
▫Park Assist System Usage Precautions ......104
䡵PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ..........................106
䡵GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . .108
▫Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . .108
▫Programming A Rolling Code ............109
▫Programming A Non-Rolling Code ........110
▫Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .....112
▫Using HomeLink .....................113
▫Security ...........................113
▫Troubleshooting Tips ..................114
▫General Information...................114
䡵POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .......115
▫To Open ...........................116
▫To Close ...........................116
▫Wind Buffeting ......................116
▫Power Sun Blind .....................116
䡵POWER OUTLETS .....................117
䡵CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED .........11
8
䡵CUPHOLDERS .......................119
䡵STORAGE ...........................120
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Glove Compartment ..................120
▫Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped .120
䡵REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES .......121
▫Securing Your Load ...................125
▫Storage Compartments.................126
䡵REAR WINDOW FEATURES .............126
▫Rear Window Defroster ................126
䡵ROOF LUGGAGE RACK-IF EQUIPPED ......127
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the
windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield but-
ton with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no
tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up,
down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror
should be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be re-
duced by moving the small control under the mirror to
the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while the small control under
the mirror is set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on
or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A
light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate
when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to
the right of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Conversation Mirror — If Equipped
There is a conversation mirror located at the top of the
overhead console.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Conversation Mirror Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
To gain access to the conversation mirror, pull down-
ward on the mirror to the open position.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control
knob toward the left or right mirror positions indicated.
Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the
mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the
mirror, turn the control to the center position to prevent
accidentally moving a mirror.
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster.
Conversation Mirror
Power Mirror Controls
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can
be rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both
sun visors are equipped with illuminated courtesy
mirrors.
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-
tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired
position.
Sun Visor (Driver Side Shown)
“Slide-On-Rod” Feature
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
SEATS
Front Seats
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss
of control which could cause a collision and
serious injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly ad-
justed seat belt.
Seat Height Adjustment
The seat height adjustment lever is located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to
raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to
lower the seat height.
Adjusting Bar
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright
position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the
lever once the seatback is in the upright position.
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
•Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision, you could slide under the
(Continued)
Height Adjustment Lever Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING! (Continued)
seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Push the power lumbar switch to adjust the lumbar
support. Release the switch when you reach the desired
position.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats
are located on the outer side of the seat.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Power Lumbar Switch
Heated Seat Switch
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
•Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Seats
Rear Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
Adjusting Bar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss
of control which could cause a collision and
serious injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly ad-
justed seat belt.
Reclining Rear Seats
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach
the desired position, release the handle.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat
NOTE:
•Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
•Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper
outboard side of the seat.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal
and by simply opening the seats to the open position,
over time the seat cushion will return to its normal
shape.
Seatback Release Lever
Seatback Folded
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3. Locate the seatback recline lever on the outboard side
of the seat and lift upward on the lever.
4. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
5. Slowly flip the entire seat rearward and firmly lock
the seat into position.
6. Raise the rear seatback and firmly lock the seatback
into position.
Seatback Recline Lever
Folding Rear Seat
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Armrest — If Equipped
To use the armrest, lower it downward.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear-
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of your
ear.
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
Armrest Cupholder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING!
•All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper posi-
tions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
•Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with
the head restraints improperly adjusted or re-
moved could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact,
the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend
forward, minimizing the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go
then push the adjustment button, and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return
to their normal position following a rear impact. If the
Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal
position, see your authorized dealership immediately.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
•A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location out-
side the occupant compartment.
•ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the re-installation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
•Do not place items over the top of the Active
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or
portable DVD players. These items may interfere
with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint
in the event of a collision and could result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re-
straints, the outboard head restraints have two comfort
positions, while the central head restraint has to be used
in the raised position. When there are no occupants in
the center seat, the head restraint can be lowered for
maximum visibility for the driver. When the center seat
is being occupied, the head restraint has to be in the
raised position.
NOTE: If the center rear head restraint requires re-
moval, see your authorized dealer.
To raise the outboard head restraints, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraints, push
the adjustment button located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the outboard head restraints, raise it as far as
it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the
release button at the base of each post while pulling the
head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push downward.
Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle.”
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released to open
the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Adjustment Buttons
Hood Release Lever
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the red
safety catch lever to the left and raise the hood. The
safety catch lever is located under the center front
edge of the hood.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and block
your vision. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood
is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle
unless hood is fully closed, with both latches en-
gaged.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight high beams, lane change assist and turn
signals.
Safety Catch Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever
upward to the first detent for headlight
operation.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to the Osymbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/tail lights will not be
on with DRL.
The DRL function can be turned on or off through the
touchscreen. Refer to your Uconnect Supplement
Manual for further information.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Operation
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
High Beams
With the low beams activated, pull the multi-
function lever towards the steering wheel to turn
on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward
the steering wheel again to turn off the high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel. This will cause the high beam head-
lights to turn on until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position
and turn on the headlights.
NOTE: If the parking lights are left on and the key is in
the stop position with the door open, an audible chime
will sound and a message will show in the instrument
cluster display. The chime will stop as soon as the lights
are switched off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster display
will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear
turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the
lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb
is defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
five times. Then, turn off automatically.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of
time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel within two minutes. Each
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
time the lever is pulled, the activation of the lights will
be extended by 30 seconds. The activation of the lights
can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel, just below the
radio. Push the switch once to turn the front
fog lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn the
front fog lights off.
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console,
push the switch to the on/right position from its center
position and the lights are always on.
On/Right Position
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch to the off/left position from its center
position and the lights are always off.
Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights
are turned on and off when the doors are opened or
closed.
Off/Left Position
Center Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead
console controls the map or reading function of the
lights. Push the switch to the right to turn on the right
light and push the switch to the left to turn on the left
light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
•When one door is opened, a three minute timer is
activated.
•When the key is removed from the ignition (within
two minutes of the ignition being turned OFF), a 10
second timer is activated.
•When the doors are unlocked with the key fob, a 10
second timer is activated.
•When the doors are locked with the key fob, the
lights will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
•When all doors are closed a 15-minute timer is
activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Map/Reading Light Switches
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only op-
erate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes.
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent
speed.
Low Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second
detent. The wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent. The wipers will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue
until the lever is released. When the lever is released,
the wipers will return to the off position and automati-
cally shut off.
Windshield Wiper Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate
automatically for three cycles after the lever is released.
CAUTION!
•Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Activation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards
to operate the rear window wiper as follows:
•In intermittent mode, when the front windshield
wiper is not operating.
•In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the front
window wiper), when the front windshield wiper is
operating.
•In continuous mode, with reverse engaged.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the front windshield wipers on and reverse gear
engaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in the
same way.
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates
the rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper
lever pushed for more than half a second to activate the
rear window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield
wiper lever will activate the smart washing function, as
described for the windscreen wiper.
Deactivation
The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.
Rear Window Wiper Operation
Rear Window Washer Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping con-
trol handle is located on the steering column, below the
turn signal lever.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the control handle up
until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelera-
tor operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the
same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control system can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/off
button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button. The cruise control indicator
light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate.
To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second
time. The cruise control indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (-)
button.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — RES + 3 — CANCEL
2 — On/Off 4 — SET -
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Speed Control without erasing
the set speed memory. Pushing the on/off button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is de-
pendent on the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed
by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Set-
tings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown is de-
pendant on the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain
the vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go
too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered or slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indi-
cation of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System
Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system
and recommendations.
Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance
from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the
audible alert becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deacti-
vated when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. The
system will be automatically activated as soon as the
trailer is removed.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can
detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from ap-
proximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm)
from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to
24 inches (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/
bumper, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that
would clear the underside of the vehicle during the
parking maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmis-
sion is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is acti-
vated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the
distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick
succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle.
A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than
12 inches (30 cm) away.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the
sensors’ field of view
Audible signal (dashboard loud-
speaker)
•Sound pulses emitted at a rate
that increases as the distance de-
creases.
•Emits continuous tone at
12 inches (30 cm).
•Adjustable volume level. (Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information).
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
•Icon appears on display.
•Message is displayed on the in-
strument cluster display (where
provided).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is
not muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if
the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant.
If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the
signal is turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings
during maneuvers parallel to walls).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the
instrument panel warning icon and message appearing
on the instrument cluster display.
The warning icon is illuminated and a mes-
sage appearing on the instrument cluster dis-
play. Refer to ⬙Instrument Cluster Display⬙in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are
indicated immediately if they occur when the system is
ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific
sensor is in failure condition, the instrument cluster
display shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is
unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure
condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire system
must be disabled. The system is turned off automati-
cally.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths.
In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the
vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4
inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke
the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of
the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
•Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
•Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
•Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other ve-
hicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
•Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loud-
speaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
•Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be tempo-
rarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not be
detected when they are in close proximity.
•The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to
filter out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly pres-
ence in sensor field of view. The filtering operation must
be performed only by an authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle when-
ever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image
will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with
a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned on, the rear camera image will
be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into ⬙PARK⬙or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to
the OFF position.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the
center of the vehicle to assist with parking.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to your Uconnect
Supplement Manual for further information.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other ve-
hicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for the safety of your
surroundings and must continue to pay attention
while backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
•To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home secu-
rity systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your
vehicles battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the sunvisor
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink
indicator is located above the center
button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/
RUN position and push and hold the two outside
HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until
the red indicator flashes.
NOTE:
•Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional but-
tons.
•If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hang-
ing antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is
NOT the button that is normally used to open and close
the door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine ON. Make sure while programming HomeLink
with the engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your
garage, or that the garage door remains open at all
times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
indicator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash
slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has re-
ceived the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener/device
motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. On some garage door
openers/devices there may be a light that blinks
when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds)
to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine ON. Make sure while programming HomeLink
with the engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your
garage, or that the garage door remains open at all
times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code” step two and follow all
remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine ON. Make sure while programming HomeLink
with the engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your
garage, or that the garage door remains open at all
times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
indicator light. The Homelink indicator will flash
slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has re-
ceived the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink button is
pushed.
•To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine ON. Make sure while programming HomeLink
with the engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your
garage, or that the garage door remains open at all
times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming A Non-Rolling Code” step two and follow
all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out”
after several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the
garage door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine ON. Make sure while programming HomeLink
with the engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your
garage, or that the garage door remains open at all
times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are program-
ming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink button is
pushed.
•To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine ON. Make sure while programming HomeLink
with the engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your
garage, or that the garage door remains open at all
times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, switch the ignition to the ON/RUN position
and the press and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,).
The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time. If the ignition is switched to the OFF
position, HomeLink will remain active for three min-
utes. During this time, if the vehicle is locked,
HomeLink is disabled.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener
hand-held transmitter.
•Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
•Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
•Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This in-
cludes most garage door opener models manufac-
tured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener
without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-
355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and
Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the device.
•The term IC before the certification/registration
number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one is
operational and the rear one fixed) and is equipped
with an electrically operated sun blind.
The power sunroof and the power sun blind can be
operated only with the ignition key turned to the MAR
position.
The power sunroof and power sun blind switches are
located in the overhead console.
WARNING!
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle or in a location acces-
sible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Sun Blind Switch
2 — Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
WARNING! (Continued)
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured too.
•Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts,
or any object to project through the sunroof
opening. Injury may result.
To Open
Pull the power sunroof switch for approximately one
second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position.
Pull the power sunroof switch a second time for ap-
proximately one second and release, the sunroof will
open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Ex-
press Open”.
NOTE: During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
To Close
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull and hold
the power sunroof switch for approximately one sec-
ond.
NOTE: During Express Close operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Power Sun Blind
Pull the power sun blind switch and the blind will
move towards the rear part of the vehicle, until it is fully
open.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the blind fully open pull the power sun blind
switch and the blind will move towards the front part of
the vehicle, until it is fully closed.
NOTE: During the automatic opening and closing
stages, if the power sun blind switch is pulled again it
will stop the blind movement.
POWER OUTLETS
Passenger Compartment Power Socket
The power outlet is located on the floor console be-
tween the front seats, in front of the gear selector,
between the two cup holders. It only operates with the
ignition key at MAR/ON.
On models with optional ⬙smoker’s kit,⬙the cigar
lighter takes the place of the power socket. Refer to
“Cigar Lighter” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
Passenger Compartment Power Socket
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
This is located on the floor console between the front
seats, next to the parking brake lever. To activate the
cigar lighter, push and release the knob. After a few
seconds the knob automatically returns to its initial
position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter
with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has
turned off.
NOTE:
•Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off.
•Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by
using unsuitable adaptors.
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are
located on the floor console between the front seats.
For the rear seat passengers their is one cupholder
located in the center armrest (if equipped).
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
Your vehicle is equipped with a upper and lower glove
compartment which is located on the right side of the
instrument panel. Push the latch button upward on the
upper glove compartment door to open it. Pull outward
on the lower glove compartment latch to open the lower
glove compartment. Push the upper glove compart-
ment door down to close it and the lower glove
compartment door upward to close it.
Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped
The front center armrest contains a storage compart-
ment. To open the storage compartment push in the
upper release latch on the front of the armrest.
Upper And Lower Glove Compartments
Glove Compartment Storage
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift upward on the armrest to gain access to the storage
area.
The front center armrest can also be lifted up and
adjusted in three positions, this is done by pulling up on
the armrest, push the latch down to adjust the armrest
down.
REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES
This vehicle features a load platform which can be
adjusted to three different heights, permitting modular
luggage compartment volume:
•Position 1 (platform completely lowered) permits
maximum luggage compartment capacity.
•Position 2 (platform at threshold level) permits a
level load threshold to facilitate loading/unloading
of objects in the luggage compartment. It also allows
the space underneath to be used as a additional
compartment for stowing objects which are more
fragile or small.
Armrest Upper Release Latch Front Center Armrest Raised Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
•Position 3 (platform completely raised) in conjunc-
tion with the lowering of the rear seat and front
passenger side seat backrests, permits long objects to
be loaded. It is advisable to use this position only for
the actual period in which the objects are trans-
ported, then return the platform to position 1 or 2.
Tilt of cargo floor
The cargo floor can also be arranged at an angle (tilted
toward the rear seat backs), in order to facilitate access
to the area below the luggage compartment. In this
position also the plan guarantees the correct locking of
any objects present inside the cargo area, avoiding that
they move in the event of sudden braking.
CAUTION!
The dimension of the cargo floor permit a maxi-
mum capacity of a distributed weight of 154 lbs
(70kg) (if positioned at threshold level) or 88 lbs
(40 kg) (if positioned at raised level) do not add
objects with a higher weight.
Tilt Floor Feature
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Access to double load compartment
To access the double load compartment, proceed as
follows:
1. Grip handle and raise platform, holding it with one
hand.
2. Place the desired objects in compartment.
Load Platform
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
Load Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3. Then reposition the platform correctly in the hous-
ings on the side panels and rear crossmember.
NOTE: Movements of the load platform must take
place in a central position relative to the luggage
compartment.
Moving the load platform
To move the load platform from lower to upper posi-
tion, proceed as follows:
1. Grip handle and raise the platform, holding it with
one hand.
Platform Housings
1 — Front Locations
2 — Rear Locations
Load Platform
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Position the platform correctly on housing on the
side panels.
Securing Your Load
There are two tie downs inside the luggage compart-
ment for attaching cables which can secure the load
carried.
A further two tie downs located on the rear crossmem-
ber.
Raised Position
1 — Front Housing Locations
2 — Rear Housing Locations
Cargo Tie Down Locations
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Two hooks are also available on the side panels to fix
loads which are not excessively heavy (e.g. bags). To use
the hooks, push the release button.
CAUTION!
The maximum load admitted per each bag hook is
22 lbs (10 kg).
Storage Compartments
There are two storage compartments located on the rear
side panels.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located
with the climate controls on the instrument
panel. Push this button to turn on the rear window
defroster. An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
Cargo Side Panel Hook Locations
1 — Release Button
2 — Hook
Storage Compartment
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20
minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the
button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK-IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 110 lbs (50 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Their are two attachment points inside the door jambs
that the Roof Rack crossbars attach to.
Roof Rack Attachment Points
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack cross-
bars. The roof rack does not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of
cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack
does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES .........131
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ................132
▫Instrument Cluster Descriptions ..........133
䡵WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS ......134
▫Red Telltale Indicator Lights .............135
▫Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ...........140
▫Green Telltale Indicator Lights ...........148
▫White Telltale Indicator Lights ...........149
▫Blue Telltale Indicator Lights ............149
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........150
▫Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons . .150
▫Instrument Cluster Display Setup Menu . . . .150
▫Change Engine Oil Indicator System ......152
▫Trip Computer ......................152
▫Trip Button .........................153
▫Values Displayed .....................154
▫Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)...........................155
䡵CYBERSECURITY......................166
䡵UCONNECT SETTINGS .................167
▫Buttons On The Faceplate...............167
▫Buttons On The Touchscreen.............167
▫Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Settings .........................168
▫Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
6.5 NAV Settings .....................175
䡵UCONNECT RADIOS ..................190
䡵IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL .....190
䡵STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .....191
4
▫Radio Operation .....................191
▫Player Operation .....................192
䡵CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ..........192
䡵RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .192
䡵CLIMATE CONTROLS ..................193
▫Manual Climate Control Overview ........193
▫Automatic Climate Control Overview ......197
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ..........................202
▫Operating Tips ......................203
䡵VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS .......206
▫Introducing Uconnect..................206
▫Get Started .........................207
▫Basic Voice Commands ................208
▫Radio .............................208
▫Media.............................209
▫Phone.............................210
▫Navigation (6.5 NAV)..................211
▫Voice Text Reply .....................212
▫General Information...................213
▫Additional Information ................213
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Uconnect Phone For Bluetooth Hands
Free Calling
7 — Fixed Upper Air Vent 13 — Climate Controls
2 — Multifunction Lever – Light Control 8 — Passenger Front Air Bag 14 — USB Port/SD Card/AUX Socket
3 — Instrument Cluster And Warning
Lights
9 — Upper Glove Compartment 15 — Uconnect Audio System
4 — Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Com-
puter
10 — Storage Compartment 16 — Ignition Switch
5 — Speed Control 11 — Lower Glove Compartment 17 — Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
6 — Air Vents 12 — Switch Bank
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Speedometer
•Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Fuel Gauge
•The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of
the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
3. Temperature Gauge
•The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is operat-
ing satisfactorily.
•The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather or up
mountain grades. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide
to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining
Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cool-
ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for ser-
vice.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
4. Tachometer
•Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per min-
ute (RPM x 1000).
5. Instrument Cluster Display
•The instrument cluster display shows messages
when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
English
Metric
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is
at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic sys-
tem malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light
will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake
Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by placing the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If
the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by
an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN) position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake applica-
tion.
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-
perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-
vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-
mation.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or
remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on,
or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on inter-
mittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-
diately.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indi-
cate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and
stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be-
come inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized
dealer immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-
ther information.
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on for
four seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on, see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the ESC system or
TCS system become active.
NOTE:
•
The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
•
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was
turned off previously.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Rear Defrost Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Rear Defrost Light
This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window de-
froster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Passenger Air Bag Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Passenger Air Bag Indicator Light
This light should come and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned to the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light stays on,
or comes on while driving it may indicate a problem with a passenger air bag system, if the
light flickers it may indicate an air bag warning bag failure. Have an authorized dealer ser-
vice the air bag system immediately.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position before en-
gine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from STOP (OFF/LOCK) to
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN), have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in nor-
mal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you drive slowly or park over flammable sub-
stances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair imme-
diately using the dedicated tire repair kit and con-
tact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al-
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
erly.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F
(–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not
been used. The Glow Plug light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 seconds.
If equipped with a block heater harness the message ⬙Plug In Engine Heater⬙, will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5°F (-15° C) at the
time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn
signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
White Telltale
Light What It Means
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to
“Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙scenario.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display for
viewing, and display the total miles (kilometers) in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed
to display important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your instrument clus-
ter display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
The instrument cluster display control buttons are lo-
cated on the instrument panel below the radio.
Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the
menu and/or go to next screen or to confirm the
required menu option. Push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to return to the
main screen.
Push and release the up button to scroll upward
through the displayed menu and the related options or
to increase the displayed value.
Push and release the down button to scroll downward
through the displayed menu and the related options or
to decrease the value displayed.
NOTE: up and down buttons activate different func-
tions according to the following situations:
•To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
•To increase or decrease values during settings.
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the
instrument cluster display will turn on the clock, the
external temperature and the miles or kilometers cov-
ered for a few seconds.
Instrument Cluster Display Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. The menu includes the following functions:
NOTE: Some of the Menu Items could be managed by
Uconnect (if equipped). In that case, some of these are
not present in instrument cluster display.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Dimmer
•Headlight Adj
•Speed Buzzer
•Headlamp Sensor
•Cornering Lights
•Rain Sensor
•Trip B Data
•Set Time
•Set Date
•First Page
•See Radio
•Autoclose
•Units
•Language
•Buzzer Volume
•Seat Belt Buzzer
•Service
•Passenger Airbag
•Day Lights
•Hill Start
•Tire Reset
•City Brake Control
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the up or down button (by single
pushes) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store
the new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub-
menu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up or down button (by single
pushes) to scroll through all the submenu options.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the displayed submenu option and to open the
relevant setup menu.
4. Push and release the up or down button (by single
pushes) to select the new setting for this submenu
option.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store
the new setting and go back to the previously
selected submenu option.
6. Push and release and hold the MENU button to
return to the main menu (short hold) or the main
screen (longer hold).
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the instrument cluster display for approxi-
mately ten seconds after a single chime has sounded to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may fluc-
tuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change
indicator system (after performing the scheduled main-
tenance), refer to the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster.
It features a driver-interactive display (displays infor-
mation such as: trip information, range, fuel consump-
tion, average speed and travel time).
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new
trip).
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
•Outside Temperature
•Range
•Trip distance A
•Average Economy A
•Instant Economy
•Average speed A
•Travel time A (driving time).
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
•Trip distance B
•Average Economy B
•Average speed B
•Travel time B (driving time)
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip
B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Consumption”
cannot be reset.
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
•A short button push displays the different values.
•A long button push resets the system and then starts
a new trip.
Trip Reset
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Trip Button Features
New Trip
The Trip can be reset the following ways:
•Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
•When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 miles or
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59
(999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset
automatically.
•Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the
information associated with Trip A or Trip B functions
will be reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for
over 2 seconds to reset trip information.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer
than one second.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing settings.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
•Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
•The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain
roads, etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load,
tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account
the above notes.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy
This value shows the approximate average fuel con-
sumption since the last reset.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a
function of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Dimmer
NOTE: The brightness of instrument panel will change
automatically only if the External Light has changed:
External Light On = Night Mode, External Light OFF =
Day Mode. In both cases, (Day or Night) it is possible to
adjust the display brightness as described in step 1
below.
To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows:
1. Push and release the up or down button to set the
required brightness level.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing settings.
Speed Buzzer (Speed Limit)
With this function, it is possible to set the car speed limit
(mph or km/h); when this limit is exceeded the driver
is immediately alerted.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. The
display will show the message (Speed Beep).
2. Push and release the up or down button to select
speed limit activation (On) or deactivation (Off).
3. When the function is activated (On), briefly push and
release the MENU button to display the presently set
activation speed. Pushing the up or down buttons
selects the speed limit. Push MENU to confirm
selection.
NOTE: Selection is possible between 20 – 125 mph or
(32 – 201 km/h), depending on the selected unit. The
setting will increase/decrease by five units each time
the up/down button is pushed. Push and hold the
up/down button to increase/decrease the setting rap-
idly. Save the setting by briefly pushing the button
when you approach the required setting.
•Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On”
will flash on the display.
2. Push and release the down button. “Off” will flash
on the display.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Headlight Sensor (Automatic Headlight/Dusk
Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment)
This function is used to turn the headlights on or off
according to external light conditions.
The dusk sensor sensitivity can be adjusted according to
3 levels (level 1 = minimum sensitivity, level 2 =
medium sensitivity, level 3 = maximum sensitivity); the
greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light
variation needed to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting
on level 3 at sunset the headlights switch on earlier than
in levels 1 and 2).
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Proceed as follows to set:
1. Push MENU button briefly. The level set previously
flashes on the display.
2. Push the up or down button to make the adjustment.
3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
Cornering Lights (Activation/Deactivation Of
Cornering Lights)
This function activates/deactivates (⬙On⬙/⬙Off⬙) the cor-
nering lights (see the description in the “Exterior
Lights” paragraph).
Proceed as follows to activate/deactivate the lights:
1. Push the MENU button briefly. ⬙On⬙or ⬙Off⬙flash on
the display, according to what has been previously
set.
2. Push up or down to make your choice.
3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
Rain Sensor (Rain Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment)
This function allows you to adjust the rain sensor
sensitivity to four levels.
To set the required sensitivity level, proceed as follows:
1. Push the MENU button briefly. The sensitivity
“level” set previously flashes on the display.
2. Push the up or down button to make the adjustment.
3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
Trip B Data (Trip B On)
Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.
For further information, see “Trip Computer.”
For activation/deactivation, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to
select Trip B data. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to turn ON or OFF.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Trip B Data Submenu Settings:
•On
•Off
•Return to MENU
Set Time (Clock)
This function may be used to set the clock through two
submenu items: “Time” and “Mode.”
Proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the up or down buttons to highlight “Set
Time” — Push and release the MENU button.
2. Push and release the up or down button to navigate
the two sub-menu items.
3. Select the required option and then push and release
the MENU button.
4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly
push and release the MENU button and “Hours”
will flash on the display.
5. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
6. Briefly push and release the MENU button and
“Minutes” will flash on the display.
7. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
NOTE:
•The setting will increase or decrease by one unit
each time the up or down button is pushed. Push
and hold the button to increase/decrease the set-
ting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pushing the
button when you approach the required setting.
•Briefly push and release the MENU button to
return to the “Time” sub-function.
•When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly push
and release the MENU button. The previously set
display format will flash on the display.
•Push and release the up or down button to select
“24h” or “12h.”
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When you have selected the required settings, briefly
push and release the MENU button to go back to the
“Time” or “Mode” sub-menu screen, or push and hold
the MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Set Date
This function may be used to set the date (day - month
- year).
To change, the date proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the up or down button to highlight “Date.”
Push and release the MENU button and “Year” will
begin to flash.
2. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button and
“Month” will flash on the display.
4. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button and
“Day” will flash on the display.
6. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one
unit each time the up or down button is pushed. Push
and hold the up or down button to increase/decrease
the setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pushing
the button when you approach the required setting.
•Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
First Page (Display Of Information On The Main
Screen)
This function allows you to choose the information you
would like to see on the main screen. You can view the
date or the trip distance.
To make your choice, proceed as follows:
•Briefly push the MENU button. ⬙Initial page⬙will be
displayed.
•Briefly push the MENU button again to display the
⬙Date⬙and ⬙Engine info⬙options.
•Push the up or down buttons to select the informa-
tion you wish to see on the main page of the display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
•Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the
menu screen or hold the button down to go back to
the standard screen without saving.
When the key is turned to MAR/ACC/ON/RUN and
the initial check stage is over, the display will show the
information selected via the ⬙First Page⬙menu function.
Audio Repetition (Repeat Audio Information)
With this function active, the instrument cluster display
shows information relevant to the sound system.
•Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tun-
ing activation or AutoStore.
•CD audio, CD MP3: track number.
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system
info displaying, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the up or down arrow button to highlight See
Radio and push and release the MENU button.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
If the radio has Uconnect, refer to the appropriate
“Uconnect Radio Supplement” for further information.
Audio Repetition Submenu Settings:
•Off
•On
•Return to MENU
Autoclose
With this function active, the doors will automatically
lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
To change the setting proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push the
up or down button to highlight Autoclose. Push and
release the MENU button to enter Autoclose MENU.
2. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Units (Set Units)
This function may be used to set the measurement unit
in three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature,” and
“Fuel Economy and Tire Pressure.”
To set the required unit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the up or down button to highlight Units.
Push and release the MENU button to enter Units
MENU.
2. Push and release the up or down button to navigate
the three sub-menus.
3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly push
and release the MENU button.
4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu, briefly
push and release the MENU button. Either “mi” or
“km” will appear on the display (according to the
previous setting).
5. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
6. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return
to the sub-menu.
7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu,
briefly push and release the MENU button. Either
“mpg,” “km/l ” or “l/100km” will appear on the
display (according to the previous setting).
If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit
will be displayed in “mpg.”
If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit
will be displayed in either km/l or l/100km.
1. Push and release the up or down button for settings.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return
to the sub-menu.
3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly
push and release the MENU button. Either “°F” or
“°C” will appear on the display (according to the
previous setting).
4. Push and release the up or down button for settings.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return
to the Tire Pressure — PSI/KPA sub-menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
When you have made the required settings, briefly
push and release the MENU button to go back to the
sub-menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
Language (Selecting The Language)
The messages can be displayed in the following lan-
guages: Italian, English, Turkce, Nederlands, Spanish,
French, Dutch, Polish, Brasilian.
To set the required language, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the up or down button to highlight Lan-
guage. Push and release the MENU button to enter
the Language MENU.
2. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning
Buzzer Volume)
With this function the volume of the buzzer accompa-
nying any failure/warning indication can be adjusted
to one of eight volume levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. The
previously set volume “level” will flash on the
display.
2. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Seat Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For BeltAlert
Indication)
This function will only be displayed after an authorized
dealer has deactivated the BeltAlert system. Refer to
“Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert” in
“Occupant Restraints” for further information.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To reactivate this function, proceed as follows:
1. Push and release the up or down button briefly; ⬙Off⬙
will flash on the display. Push and release the or up
or down button and ⬙On⬙will appear.
2. Push and release the SET ESC button briefly to
return to the submenu screen or hold the button
down to return to the main menu screen without
saving.
Service (Scheduled Servicing)
This function allows you to display the information
about mileage/km intervals or time intervals for car
servicing.
To consult this display, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push the MENU button: the display shows
when servicing is due in mi/km or days according to
the previous setting (see paragraph ⬙Units Of Mea-
surement⬙).
2. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold it down to return to the standard
screen.
NOTE: The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes car
maintenance at fixed intervals. This is displayed auto-
matically, with ignition key at MAR/ACC/ON/RUN,
1242 miles (2000 km) before servicing or, where pro-
vided, 30 days before servicing. It is also displayed each
time the key is turned to MAR/ACC/ON/RUN or
every 124 miles (200 km). Below this threshold, servic-
ing indications are more frequent. The display will be in
miles or km according to the unit of measurement set.
When the next scheduled service is approaching, the
word “Service” will appear on the display, followed by
the number of miles/kilometers or days left, when the
key is turned to MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. Go to a Fiat
Dealership, where the ⬙Scheduled Servicing Plan⬙op-
erations will be performed and the message will be
reset.
When the service interval is reached and for about
600 miles/1000 km or 30 days, a service due message is
displayed.
Air Bag/Passenger Bag (Activation/Deactivation
Of Passenger Side Front Air Bag And Side Bag
For Pelvis, Chest And Shoulder Protection)
This function allows the passenger air bag to be
activated/deactivated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Proceed as follows:
1. Push the MENU button and, after the message ⬙Bag
pass: Off⬙(to deactivate) or ⬙Bag pass: On⬙(to
activate) is displayed by pushing up and down
buttons, push the MENU button again.
2. A confirmation request message will appear on the
display.
3. Push the up or down buttons to select ⬙Yes⬙(to
confirm activation/deactivation) or ⬙No⬙(to cancel).
4. Push the MENU button briefly. A message will
display confirming the selection before returning to
the menu screen. Hold down the button to return to
the standard screen without storing.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This function may be used to activate/deactivate the
Daytime Running Lamps.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the up or down button to highlight “Daytime
Running Lamps” (DRL). Push and release the
MENU button to enter the DRL MENU.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” or
“Off” will flash on the display (according to previous
setting).
3. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
4. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Hill Start Assist
This function is used when starting a vehicle from a
stop on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level
of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period
of time after the foot has been removed from the brake
pedal.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” or
“Off” will flash on the display (according to previous
setting).
2. Push and release the up or down button for settings.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
City Brake Control (Collision Mitigation)
This function allows the driver to activate (⬙On⬙)or
deactivate (⬙Off⬙) the City Brake Control - ⬙Collision
Mitigation⬙system.
To adjust proceed as follows:
1. Push MENU button briefly. ⬙On⬙or ⬙Off⬙will flash
on the display, according to what has been previ-
ously set.
2. A confirmation request message will appear on the
display.
3. By pushing the up or down buttons, select ⬙Yes⬙(to
confirm activation/deactivation) or ⬙No⬙(to cancel).
4. Push the MENU button briefly. A message will
display confirming the selection before returning to
the menu screen. Hold down the button to return to
the standard screen without storing.
When the system is deactivated, the dedicated warning
light in the instrument panel switches on.
Tire Reset
With this function, it is possible to reset the TPMS.
To reset, proceed as follows:
•Briefly push the MENU button. The display will
show Reset.
•Push the up or down buttons to select “Yes” or “No.”
•Briefly push the MENU button. The display will
show ⬙Confirm.⬙
•Push the up or down buttons to select ⬙Yes⬙to reset
or ⬙No⬙to exit the page.
•Hold the MENU button down again to return to the
standard screen or to the main menu.
Exit Menu
This function closes the initial menu screen.
To exit the menu screen, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the main screen.
2. Push and release the up button to return to the first
menu option (Speed Beep).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
3. Push and release the down button to return to the
last menu option (Daylights).
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks.
These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive
information. This information allows systems and fea-
tures in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlaw-
ful access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Simi-
lar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability and
performance of your systems or to reduce the potential
risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
•It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
•ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source.
Media of unknown origin could possibly contain
malicious software, and if installed in your ve-
hicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
•As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest autho-
rized dealer immediately.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regard-
ing software updates.
•To help further improve vehicle security and mini-
mize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle
owners should:
•Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
software-update to learn about available Uconnect
software updates.
•Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully inter-
cept information and private communications without
your consent. For further information, refer to “On-
board Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90),
push the center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and
back arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out
of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0 Settings
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access programmable features
that may be equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety &
Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Options, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup and
System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the
desired mode, press and release the preferred setting
until the button is highlighted. Once the setting is
complete, either press the back arrow or Done button on
the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to
return to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
the list of available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “Run” position.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE: When the “Display Mode” feature is set to “Auto” the radio touchscreen’s brightness will be adjusted
with all other Instrument Panel displays and lights when they are adjusted using the instrument cluster display
buttons on the right-hand side of the instrument cluster display. When the “Display Mode” feature is set to
“Manual” the radio screen brightness can be adjusted independently using the “Brightness” feature below.
Language English Español Français
Touchscreen Beep On Off
US Changes the instrument cluster display to US units of measure.
Metric Changes the instrument cluster display to Metric units of measure.
Display Trip B On/Off ON OFF
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Long
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
Show Time Status On Off
Set Date Set Date
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
NOTE: When in the “Sync Time” display, you may sync the time with GPS.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
NOTE: When “Set Date” is selected, you can adjust the month, day, and year using the up and down arrow
buttons.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen, the following setting will be avail-
able:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Backup Camera On Off
Camera Delay On Off
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Daytime Running Lights On Off
Corner Lights On Off
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the
touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE: When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer +–
NOTE:
•
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
•
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade When in the “Balance/ Fade” display, you may adjust the Balance settings.
Auto-On Radio On Off Recall Last
NOTE: When the “Auto-On Radio” feature is selected, the radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min
AUX Volume Match On Off
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE: The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For fur-
ther information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to
or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
•
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information
on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
•
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed
on the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Settings
Press the Settings button to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote
Start, Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup and System Informa-
tion.
NOTE:
•Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
•Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the
desired mode, press and release the preferred setting
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, either press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the
“X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button
on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
up or down through the available settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With Head-
lights ON
+–
Display Brightness With Head-
lights OFF
+–
Set Language Select Language
NOTE: When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all
display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system. Press the Set Language button on
the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster
On Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle ap-
proaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-
By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touchscreen.
Units
•Units
When in this display, you may select to have the
instrument cluster display, odometer, and navigation
system changed between US and Metric units of mea-
sure. Press “US,” “Metric” or “Custom.”
•Custom
When “Custom” is selected, you may select each unit of
measure independently displayed in the instrument
cluster display, and navigation system.
Setting Name Selectable Options
US Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Metric Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Custom Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Long
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS On Off
NOTE: This feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time set-
ting, press the “Sync Time with Nav” button on the touchscreen.
Set Time Hours +–
NOTE: This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync Time with Nav” button on the touchscreen
must be unchecked.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time Minutes +–
NOTE: This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync Time with Nav” button on the touchscreen
must be unchecked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE: This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Cam-
era Delay
On Off
NOTE: When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into “PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Setting Name Selectable Options
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is acti-
vated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when
the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Interior Ambient
Lights
+–
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the brightness of the interior ambient lighting.
Headlight Sensitivity 123
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it allows the Headlight Sensitivity to be adjusted according to three levels
(level 1 = minimum sensitivity, level 2 = medium sensitivity, level 3 = maximum sensitivity); the greater the
sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at
sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
Greeting Lights On Off
Daytime Running
Lights
Yes No
Steering Directed
Lights
Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn relative to a change in the direction of the steer-
ing wheel.
Cornering Lights On Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators
are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Headlights With Wip-
ers — If Equipped
Yes No
Auto Dim High
Beams — If Equipped
Yes No
Flash Headlights With
Lock
On Off
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is
in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Headlights With Lock Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked with the key fob.
Sound Horn With Remote Lock Yes No
Sound Horn With Remote Start Yes No
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
NOTE:
•
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
key fob unlock button. When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press the key fob unlock
button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
•
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s
door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is
programmed pressing the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door
first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry Yes No
NOTE: This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to press the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
Memory Linked to Key Fob On/
Off — If Equipped
Yes No
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory Linked to Key Fob On/Off” button on the touchscreen,
then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will highlight indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow/X button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Horn With Remote Start Yes No
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Steering Wheel With Ve-
hicle Start — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn
ON when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver
vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated Seats” button on the touchscreen,
then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All Starts.” The button will highlight indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is
shut off.
Engine Off Power Delay +–
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay +–
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90
seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Radio Off Delay 0 MIN 20 MIN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons “C” Icon
NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
Equalizer +–
NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted
Volume
Off 1 2 3
NOTE: This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE: Whis feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX Volume
Match — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE: This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX
input.
Loudness — If
Equipped
Yes No
NOTE: Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes.
Auto-On Radio On Off Recall Last
NOTE: The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last
ignition off.
Phone/Bluetooth
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in
a collision causing serious injury or death.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones Currently Paired Phones
Paired Audio Devices Currently Paired Audio Devices
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
SXM Tune Start
NOTE: The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time
the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize
it’s on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to
play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to
or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on
the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” but-
ton on the touchscreen, the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the AUX Jack or USB port.
AUX Jack And USB Port
1 — AUX Jack
2 — USB Port
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to the Uconnect 5.0 or 6.5 Owner’s Manual
Supplement for iPod and external USB support capa-
bility.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located at the
rear of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to
select/enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are
in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Player Operation
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the Player. Pushing the bottom of the switch
once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to
the beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the follow-
ing precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft
cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid
scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, clean-
ers, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may be-
come too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the
radio volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when
the A/C system is engaged.
Manual Climate Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Icon Description
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside
air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,
or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog
on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air posi-
tion for maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear win-
dow defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indi-
cates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the
control clockwise from the off position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard out-
lets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a
shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of
the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Icon Description
Mix Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This set-
ting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost
Mode
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the knob clockwise to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indica-
tor illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use De-
frost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window de-
frosting and defogging.
Additional Electric Heater (If Equipped)
The additional electric heater ensures more rapid pas-
senger compartment heating.
It activates in cold weather conditions, if the following
conditions are verified:
•outside temperature low;
•engine coolant temperature low;
•engine on;
•fan speed set to 1st speed;
•Temperature Control knob turned completely clock-
wise to red section.
The heater is switched off when at least one of the
conditions above is no longer verified.
NOTE: The power of the electric heater is modulated
according to the battery voltage.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
System Maintenance
In winter, the climate control system must be turned on
at least once a month for about 10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership
before the summer.
NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf coolant which does
not pollute the environment in the event of accidental
leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a
allowed.
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Climate Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside
air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,
or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog
on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air posi-
tion for maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode
and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illu-
minates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If
the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 min-
utes.
Passenger Temperature Knob
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Rotate the knob clockwise
for warmer temperature settings. Rotate the knob counterclockwise for cooler temperature
settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will move up with
the driver’s temperature, when it is increased.
Blower Control Knob
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system.
There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using the blower con-
trol knob on the faceplate. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
Icon Description
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard out-
lets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a
shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of
the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This set-
ting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Climate Control Power Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Driver Temperature Knob
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Rotate the knob clockwise for
warmer temperature settings. Rotate the knob counterclockwise for cooler temperature set-
tings. When the SYNC feature is active, the driver’s temperature will move down with the
passenger’s temperature, when it is decreased.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
NOTE:
•If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
•If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation
of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high hu-
midity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
recirculate interior air by pushing the Recirculation
control button. The recirculation indicator will illumi-
nate when this button is selected. Push the button a
second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and
allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with
Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation
while in this mode will cause the LED in the control
button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
•The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/Metric customer-
programmable feature.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Auto-
matic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will
remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower
will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual over-
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC
display will be turned off when the system is being
used in the manual mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DE-
FROST mode must be manually selected to clear the
windshield and side glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheat-
ing. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recom-
mended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selec-
tion.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func-
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service
your A/C air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0
or 6.5 NAV system.
Key Features:
•5.0-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/
USB/Bluetooth
•Bluetooth with integrated voice control
•GPS navigation (if equipped)
Key Features:
•6.5-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/
USB/SD Card/Bluetooth
•Bluetooth with integrated voice control
•GPS navigation (if equipped)
Uconnect 5.0 NAV
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device
and feature compatibility and to find phone pair-
ing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and
saying a Voice Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
2 — Push To MUTE
3 — Push To End Call
4 — Push To Say Vocal Commands
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
•Cancel to stop a current voice session.
•Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
•Repeat to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to
hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio
trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
•Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM.
•Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1.
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you
with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB Port, Bluetooth
and Auxiliary Ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is
only available for connected USB and iPod devices.
(Remote CD player optional and not available on all
vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
•Change source to Bluetooth.
•Change source to iPod.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
•Change source to USB.
•Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits;
Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical.
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility
and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
•Call John Smith.
•Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts.
•Redial (call previous outgoing phone number).
Uconnect 5.0 Media
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Media
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Call back (call previous incoming phone number).
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the
name exactly as it appears in your phone book.
When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “Call John Smith work.”
Navigation (6.5 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive
Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
.
After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say “Listen.” (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect sys-
tem.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow
the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me. I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are
you? I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implemen-
tation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take
advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Navigation
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and
Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause un-
desired operation.
NOTE:
•The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the device.
•The term IC before the certification/registration
number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
•U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7
days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
•Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
•Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
•Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
•Sun., Closed
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵STARTING PROCEDURES ...............218
▫Automatic Transmission ...............218
▫Normal Starting......................218
▫Cold Weather Operation ...............218
▫Extended Park Starting.................219
▫If Engine Fails To Start ................219
▫After Starting .......................220
▫Turbo Charger “Cool Down” ............220
䡵AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...........220
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock..............221
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . .221
▫Six-Speed Automatic Transmission ........221
䡵AUTOSTICK .........................227
▫Operation ..........................227
䡵DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ........228
▫Acceleration ........................228
▫Traction ...........................228
䡵DRIVING THROUGH WATER ............229
▫Flowing/Rising Water .................229
▫Shallow Standing Water ................229
䡵ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ............230
䡵PARKING BRAKE .....................230
䡵BRAKE SYSTEM ......................232
䡵ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . .232
▫Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . .232
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) ..............233
▫Traction Control System (TCS) ...........234
▫Hill Start Assist (HSA) ................234
5
▫Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) ..........235
▫Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .........235
▫ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ...............236
▫Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .........238
䡵TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ............240
▫Tire Markings .......................240
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN)..........242
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions .........243
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ..........244
䡵TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .......249
▫Tire Pressure .......................249
▫Tire Inflation Pressures ................250
▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . .251
▫Radial Ply Tires .....................251
▫Tire Types ..........................252
▫Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ............253
▫Spare Tires — If Equipped ..............253
▫Tire Spinning .......................256
▫Tread Wear Indicators .................256
▫Life Of Tire ........................257
▫Replacement Tires ....................258
䡵TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) ......259
䡵TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .260
䡵DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .......260
▫Treadwear..........................261
▫Traction Grades ......................261
▫Temperature Grades...................261
䡵TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) .............................262
▫Base System ........................264
▫General Information...................266
䡵FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo .......266
▫Reformulated Gasoline ................266
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .............267
▫CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . .267
▫MMT In Gasoline ....................267
▫Materials Added To Fuel ...............268
▫Fuel System Cautions..................268
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............269
䡵ADDING FUEL .......................269
䡵TRAILER TOWING ....................271
䡵RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ..................272
▫Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ...........................272
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor.
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Depress the
brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at
low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine crank-
ing when the ambient temperature is less than –22°F
(–30°C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indi-
cates an engine block heater has not been used. An
externally powered electric engine block heater is avail-
able as a factory installed option.
At the time the engine is shut off, the message “plug in
engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5°F
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
(–15°C). This acts as a reminder to avoid possible crank
delays at the next cold start.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 Synthetic oil
and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals
is important to prevent engine damage and ensure
satisfactory starting in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the ve-
hicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release
it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds,
cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position,
wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Turbo Charger “Cool Down”
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the
pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has
been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbo-
charger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-
tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the fol-
lowing precautions are not observed:
•Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine
is running. Before exiting a vehicle always apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
(Continued)
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF
(key removal) position. The key can only be removed
from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF
position, and once removed, the transmission is locked
in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmis-
sion gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are ap-
plied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the igni-
tion must be turned to the ON/RUN mode (engine
running or not), and the brake pedal (and the lock
button on the gear selector) must be pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear
range. You must press the brake pedal and push the
lock button on the gear selector to move the gear
selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission
Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, push
the lock button on the front of the gear selector and
move the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the
DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a
few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Moving the gear selector into the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position)
activates AutoStick mode, providing manual shift con-
trol and displaying the current gear in the instrument
cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the Autostick
position will manually select the transmission gear.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
Transmission Gear Selector
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is
in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the park-
ing brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
•Apply the parking brake.
•Shift the transmission into PARK.
•Turn the engine OFF.
•Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
•Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine
is running. Before exiting a vehicle always apply
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
WARNING! (Continued)
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could
result.
•DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
•When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on
the gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all
the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
•Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
•With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selec-
tor will not move out of PARK.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift
into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traf-
fic or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading con-
ditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to
AutoStick in this section for further information) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend trans-
mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller will expand the
range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is
done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat-
ing.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine coolant temperature.
Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera-
ture has risen to a suitable level.
Instrument Cluster Messages
Dedicated messages will be displayed in the instrument
cluster to alert the driver when certain unusual condi-
tions occur.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission remains in third gear regardless of which
forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEU-
TRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home
Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized
dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to nor-
mal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we rec-
ommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer
has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem
could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driv-
ing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the Drive position), it can be moved forward
and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select
the transmission gear being used. Moving the gear
selector forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward
(+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described
below.
•The transmission will automatically upshift when
necessary to prevent engine over-speed.
•The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
•The transmission will automatically downshift to
first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
•You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or
third gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be
helpful in snow or icy conditions. To select second or
third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap
the gear selector rearward (+) once or twice.
•If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
•The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
•Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en-
gaged because the transmission will not shift auto-
matically.
•Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
•The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on
a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision
or personal injury.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for
a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in
a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cau-
tions and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
CAUTION!
•Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles
in the way before driving through the standing
water.
•Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
•Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not
continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid ap-
pears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Getting
water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
This only operates with the key turned to MAR/ON
and the engine started. The steering allows the force
required at the steering wheel to be adjusted to suit
driving conditions.
NOTE: When turning the ignition key quickly, full
power steering functionality can be achieved after a few
seconds.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly
as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever
up slightly, push the side button with your thumb, then
lower the lever completely.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the
Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury.
1 — Parking Brake Release Button
2 — Parking Brake Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall brak-
ing effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required
to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions and
are commonly referred to as ESC.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer
to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel
lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery sur-
faces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turn-
ing the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if
the fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
•Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
•The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
•The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
•The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop
as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping se-
quence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer de-
sired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
WARNING!
•The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions.
•The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing.
•The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If
wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the
slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of
the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), func-
tions similar to a limited slip differential and controls
the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a
driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full Off
mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
this section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will
maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied
for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot
off the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the
throttle during this short period of time, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down
the hill. The system will release brake pressure in
proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the
vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of
travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•Vehicle must be stopped.
•Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
•Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing
uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the
system will not activate and slight rolling may
occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in for
further information.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
The DST function uses the integration of the ESC
system with the electric power steering to increase the
safety level of the whole vehicle.
In critical situations (braking with different grip condi-
tions), through the DST function the ESC system con-
trols the steering to implement an additional torque
contribution on the steering wheel, to suggest the most
correct manoeuvre to the driver.
The coordinated action of brakes and steering increases
the safety and vehicle control feeling.
NOTE: The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi-
tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by
the driver and compares it to the actual path of the
vehicle. When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or under-
steer condition.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
•Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
•The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction af-
forded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also can-
not prevent collisions resulting from loss of ve-
hicle control due to inappropriate driver input for
the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
•Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
characteristics of your vehicle, and may nega-
tively affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension, brak-
ing system, tire type and size or wheel size may
adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also de-
grade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifica-
tion or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position for four sec-
onds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific
reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional
information.
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank
above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” button and the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will il-
luminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn off. This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it
then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ESC Off Switch
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
•High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15
LT
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R= Construction code
–⬙R⬙means radial construction, or
–⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
EXAMPLE:
H= Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the
tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on
the inboard side of the tire.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Term Definition
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the ve-
hicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overload-
ing can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling,
and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions. Under-inflation increases tire flex-
ing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can
cause damage that results in tire failure. Unequal
tire pressures can cause steering problems. You
could lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or
under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and
can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle con-
trol. Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Start-
ing And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple-
ment, located in your Owner’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and
rear axles must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in “Starting And Operating”, or the Tire
Information Supplement located in your Owner’s Infor-
mation kit, for further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never ex-
ceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and size
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
•For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overload-
ing can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling,
and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•Safety and Vehicle Stability
•Economy
•Tread Wear
•Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
•Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•Underinflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in overheating and tire failure.
•Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stabil-
ity of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
NOTE:
•Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
•Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated.
•Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at
high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure
is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or origi-
nal equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres-
sures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to
the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
•The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-
bol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or
if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe
injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also
creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with a compact or limited use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-
mended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with
a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do
so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with
a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire descrip-
tion on the Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since
the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible
spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do
so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on
the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This
spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not
the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures
listed on your Tire and Loading Information Plac-
ard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread
depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this
section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•Driving style.
•Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
•Distance driven.
•Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire fail-
ure. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected regu-
larly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures.
The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use
tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the
paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator” in this section.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or
the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your
tire will be found on the original equipment tire side-
wall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
Safety Information” section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Fail-
ure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
•Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance charac-
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
•Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
•Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
•Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
•Install on Front Tires Only.
•Due to limited clearance, on a 205/55 R16, use
reduced size snow chains or traction devices with a
maximum projection of 9 mm beyond the tire profile.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredict-
able handling. You could lose control and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
•
Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise oc-
curs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
•Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
•Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
•Observe the traction device manufacturer’s in-
structions on the method of installation, operat-
ing speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and con-
tribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were estab-
lished by the National Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration. The specific grade rating assigned by
the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on
the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Tire Rotation
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and one-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does
not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplan-
ing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all passenger vehicle
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or ex-
cessive loading, either separately or in combina-
tion, can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects,
or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold tire pressure on the placard. Once
the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn
off. The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi
(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi
(159 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough
to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situa-
tion, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
•The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels
can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.
After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
•After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
•The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
•Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
•The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light.
•Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in
the instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure
levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Re-
ceiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•Receiver Module.
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an acoustic signal will be
activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire”
text message will display when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each
tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected, an audible chime will be
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
activated and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring
System” text message will display. If the ignition is
cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system
fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the follow-
ing scenarios:
•Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
•Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
•Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
•Using tire chains on the vehicle.
•Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
•The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not
monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
•If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle, a chime
will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still turn ON due to the low tire.
•However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid.
•This occurs for each subsequent ignition cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
•Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, provide satis-
factory fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high-quality un-
leaded “Regular” gasoline having a
posted octane number of 87 as speci-
fied by the (R+M)/2 method. For
optimum performance and fuel economy the use of
“Premium” 91 octane gasoline or higher is recom-
mended.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer im-
mediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gaso-
line”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and
are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivabil-
ity problems, damage critical fuel system compo-
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system perfor-
mance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should
ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle per-
formance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in mini-
mizing engine and fuel system de-
posits. When available, the usage of
Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-
mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com
for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-
tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Fed-
eral law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance and damage the emissions control
system.
•An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while
refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the tool bag or
cargo floor area in the rear cargo area) to open the
flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a
gas can.
Funnel Location Inside Of Tool Kit
Funnel Location For Vehicle With Optional Spare Tire
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
•Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank
is being filled.
•Never add fuel when the engine is running. This
is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and may cause the “Malfunction In-
dicator Light” to turn on.
•A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
Emergency Fuel Filling Procedure
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow ap-
plicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with
the front wheels OFF the ground).
CAUTION!
•DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission dam-
age. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..........274
䡵IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ..........274
䡵WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS .....................275
▫Torque Specifications ..................275
䡵TIRE SERVICE KIT .....................277
䡵JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED ..........................280
▫Jack Location .......................280
▫Spare Tire Removal ...................281
▫Preparations For Jacking ...............281
▫Jacking Instructions ..................282
▫Spare Tire Stowage ...................285
䡵JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE ...........286
▫Preparations For Jump-Start .............286
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ...............287
䡵FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............289
䡵GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ............291
䡵TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ..........292
䡵IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE ......293
䡵CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL ...........294
䡵ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .............................295
䡵EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..........295
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncom-
ing traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second
time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is
disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flash-
ers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate
action.
•On the highways — slow down.
•In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle
speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system
and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•You can also turn the temperature control to maxi-
mum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower
control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine
at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than
a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIRE SERVICE KIT
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency
repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear
storage area under the cargo floor.
Tire punctures of up to 1/4 of an inch (6mm) can be
repaired; the kit can be used in all weather conditions.
Do not remove the foreign object from the punctured
tire, i.e., screw or nail.
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out
from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw
the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
•Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
•If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
•If the tire has any sidewall damage.
•If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
•If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
•If the wheel has any damage.
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
2 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Power Button
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Sealant Bottle
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277
WARNING! (Continued)
•If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
•Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat sources.
•A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service
Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you.
•Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It
causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is any
contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
•Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult
a physician immediately.
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet
socket. Start the vehicle engine.
Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I”
position. The electric compressor will be turned on,
sealant and air will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached
within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached,
turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the
vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better
distribute the sealant inside the tire.
Attach the clear flexible sealant hose of the compressor
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start
driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant
inside the tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire
pressure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not
278 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
drive the vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the
nearest authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph
(110 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above, repeat the
inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and
continue driving.
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on
the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire
has been treated with the Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira-
tion date at your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compart-
ment, away from sources of heat. Failure to follow
this WARNING may result in sealant canister rup-
ture and serious injury or death.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
•Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
•The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used
to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The ve-
hicle should be jacked on a firm level surface
only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The spare tire jack is located in the rear cargo area
underneath the cargo floor.
Jack Location
1 — Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Jack
3 — Jack Handle
4 — Emergency Allen Key
5 — Emergency Spare Tire Bag
6 — Emergency Screwdriver
280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed in underneath the rear cargo
area on the outside of the vehicle.
1. Remove the cargo floor to access the winch.
2. Remove the jack handle and use the wrench end to
lower the spare tire.
3. When the spare is clear, replace the jack tools.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice
or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
Spare Tire Location
Winch Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 281
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while
the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•Set the parking brake firmly and place transmis-
sion in PARK.
•Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on
a jack.
•Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on
a jack.
•Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to
a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt
wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts coun-
terclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Jack Warning Label
Front Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on
each side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift
point symbols on the sill molding).
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest
to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle between the locating
notches on the sill flange.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if
the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
•For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install
a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
•Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
Rear Jacking Location
284 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
•To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in personal injury.
•To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any
sharp edges.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice.
Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for
proper lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench
by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat)
tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Spare Tire Stowage
Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut
clockwise (the flat tire must not be connected to the
winch) until effort becomes heavy and an audible click
is heard indicating the winch is properly stowed.
Cover the flat tire with the Emergency Spare Tire Bag
and stow the flat tire into the trunk.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench
or power tool may damage the winch.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 285
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery
in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is fro-
zen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal
injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
WARNING!
•Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
(Continued)
Positive Terminal
286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
•Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, place the transmission to
PARK and turn the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary elec-
trical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote posi-
tive (+) battery post. To remove the cover, pull
upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set
the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property damage
due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster ve-
hicle or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Before connecting the jumper cables to the
discharged battery, the negative (-) battery cable must
be disconnected from the discharged battery. This is the
only way to successfully jump start the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287
Follow these steps to disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable:
1. Pull outward on the negative (-) battery cable termi-
nal release lever to the open position.
2. Lift up on the negative (-) battery cable terminal and
set aside.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the negative (-) battery cable terminal of the
discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting elec-
trical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the spe-
cific ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) battery cable terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
NOTE: The negative (-) battery cable must be con-
nected to the negative (-) post of the battery.
Follow these steps to connect the negative (-) battery
cable:
1. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal to the
negative (-) post of the battery.
2. Push inward on the negative (-) battery cable termi-
nal release lever to the closed position.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your ve-
hicle, you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels, or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289
CAUTION! (Continued)
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the
⬙ESC Off⬙switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
•Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure. Al-
low the engine to idle with the transmission in
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize over-
heating and reduce the risk of transmission fail-
ure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck ve-
hicle.
•When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
•Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin
the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the gear
selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully sepa-
rate the gear selector bezel and boot assembly from
the center console.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the
gear selector override access hole (at the right rear
corner of the gear selector assembly) and push and
hold the override release lever down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
Gear Selector Override
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to pre-
vent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
CAUTION!
•Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
position.
•Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
•Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission out
of PARK in order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission dam-
age. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. To remove the key manu-
ally, proceed as follows:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area,
in the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the
cargo box.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping
control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end
of the travel position, then lock the steering column
in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower steering column
cover screws, and remove the lower cover.
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and
with the other one remove the key, sliding it out-
wards.
7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering col-
umn cover.
CAUTION!
It is advisable to contact your authorized dealer to
have the reinstall procedure carried out. If you
would like to proceed in performing the reinstall
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
procedure special attention must be paid to the
correct coupling of the clips. Otherwise damage to
the cover or noise might be heard due to incorrect
fastening of the lower cover.
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located in
the rear cargo area inside the tool bag (if equipped), or
on the left side in the cargo box. If your vehicle is out of
fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the
funnel into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer
to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating ” in this
manual.
Release Tab Location
294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information on the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . .299
䡵ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .299
▫Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .......................300
䡵REPLACEMENT PARTS .................301
䡵DEALER SERVICE ....................301
䡵MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ..........301
▫Engine Oil .........................302
▫Engine Oil Filter .....................303
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...............304
▫Maintenance-Free Battery ..............304
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance ............305
▫Body Lubrication ....................308
▫Wiper Blades .......................309
▫Adding Washer Fluid .................311
▫Exhaust System .....................311
▫Cooling System .....................313
▫Brake System .......................318
▫Automatic Transmission ...............319
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ..........................320
䡵FUSES .............................327
▫Underhood Fuses ....................327
▫Interior Fuses .......................329
▫Rear Interior Fuses ...................332
䡵VEHICLE STORAGE ...................333
䡵REPLACEMENT BULBS ................334
䡵BULB REPLACEMENT .................335
7
▫Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam.....335
▫Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime
Running Lamps......................337
▫Front Fog Lamps .....................338
▫Front, Rear Roof Lamps ................338
▫Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps ............................338
▫Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) .338
䡵FLUID CAPACITIES ...................339
䡵FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS .............................339
▫Engine ............................339
▫Chassis ...........................341
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and transmis-
sion control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent perfor-
mance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulations.
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Oil Fill Cap
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)”. It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emis-
sions tests can be performed.
•If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emis-
sions controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
•ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port
in order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
•If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
•Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
•Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled mainte-
nance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by
the use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to
genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed
your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other com-
ponents or negatively impact vehicle performance.
Immediately have potential malfunctions examined
by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended mainte-
nance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in
these components as the chemicals can damage
your engine, transmission, or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is approximately five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground,
and approximately five minutes after a fully warmed
engine is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range
markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by
a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil
when the reading is at the low end of the indicated
range will result in the oil level at the full end of the
indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it
is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled mainte-
nance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information.
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve
months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever
comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is
generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for
turbocharged engines under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-12991.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine
(SAE Grade)
MOPAR SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, ser-
vice station or governmental agency for advice on how
and where used oil and oil filters can be safely dis-
carded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dis-
posable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consid-
erably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filters
are high quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
can provide a measure of protection in the case of
engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal
is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure
that no one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction system
(air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
tery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING!
•Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery
fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do
not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water. Refer
to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
•Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
(Continued)
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
•Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
•
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
•It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use
a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a perfor-
mance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
•Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Warranty Information Book, located on the
DVD, for further warranty information.
•The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refriger-
ant or any repair requiring lines to be discon-
nected should be done by an experienced techni-
cian.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condition-
ing system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle
is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
and the blower operating, the blower can contact
hands and may propel dirt and debris into your
eyes, resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all con-
tents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the retaining tabs that secure the air filter
access door to the HVAC housing.
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Open the air filter access door. 6. Remove the particulate air filters from the HVAC air
inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out of
the housing.
A/C Air Filter Access Door A/C Air Filter Access Door Open
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need
to replace it more often.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into posi-
tion.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latch-
ing components to ensure proper function. When per-
forming other underhood services, the hood latch,
release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned
and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
A/C Air Filter Removal
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades, the wind-
shield, and rear window periodically with a sponge or
soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield or rear window. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on
to avoid damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out
of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines, or wet spots. If any of these condi-
tions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be
placed in a position that allows the wiper blades to be
easily changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers must
be in the Park position before placing the ignition in the
STOP/OFF position.
Service mode must be activated within two minutes
after the ignition is placed in the STOP/OFF position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service
Position command (antipanic) must be active for at least
half a second.
At every valid activation of Service Position command,
the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated several
times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to
a maximum of three times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is dis-
abled.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
•The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN position.
•Number of subsequent activations is three.
•Two minutes timer has expired after turning the
ignition OFF.
NOTE: When turning the ignition ON, the blades will
go into the parking position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper
blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the
wiper blade holder.
1—WiperBlade
2 — Release Button
3—WiperArm
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ anti-
freeze). Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section
for further information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer sol-
vents are flammable. They could ignite and burn
you. Care must be exercised when filling or work-
ing around the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine ex-
haust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside
the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
1—WiperBlade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3—WiperArm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
•Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breath-
ing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”
for further information.
•A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials
might be grass or leaves coming into contact with
your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
•Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle
serviced promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the
converter to overheat, resulting in possible dam-
age to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifi-
cations, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
•Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor
lead before working near the radiator cooling fan.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
•Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may start
at any time, whether the engine is running or not.
•When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact your local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally com-
patible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To pre-
vent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Or-
ganic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (anti-
freeze):
•We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Addi-
tive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
•Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher con-
centrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your
authorized dealer for assistance.
•Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality
water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
NOTE:
•It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
•Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system, please contact
your local authorized dealer.
•Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not rec-
ommended and can result in cooling system damage.
If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emer-
gency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and
refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as
soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing sur-
faces.
WARNING!
•Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
•Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion
by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-
based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean
up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed
to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being va-
porized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
•If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
•Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
•Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (anti-
freeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor-
mally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the
brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an
emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately
if the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the requirements described on the
brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be
checked when the pads are replaced. However, low
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may
be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
(Continued)
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden
brake failure. This could result in a collision.
•Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts”
in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
should be used in any transmission; only the approved
lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque con-
verter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission com-
ponents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately
to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed
at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for
the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes
are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if
the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will en-
able you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•Stone and gravel impact.
•Insects, tree sap and tar.
•Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with clear water.
•If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch
the paint.
•Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
•If the engine compartment is washed with an
high pressure jet, keep it at a distance of at least
8 inches (20 centimeters) from filler surface.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
Special Care
•If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
•It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
•If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
•If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
•If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are
well packaged and sealed.
•If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the
wheel surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
(Continued)
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
harsh brushes. These products and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment
or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-
mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products
on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will
permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These prod-
ucts may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes
before doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying the
brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor
corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They
will permanently damage this finish and such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER
WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis;
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
•For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regu-
lar cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with
any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners
to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to maintain the
original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immedi-
ately.
•Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
•Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Keton based cleaning products to clean leather
seats, as damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on
the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray
cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface
which minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your
vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with
a wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a colli-
sion if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.).
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
WARNING!
•When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or prop-
erty damage.
•Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
tion is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
•If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
•If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering sys-
tem blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side
of the engine compartment, next to the battery. To
access the fuses, push the release tabs and remove the
cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – Body Controller
F02 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller Rear Distribution Unit
Front Distribution Unit
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – Anti-Lock Brake Pump
F05 70 Amp Tan – Electric Power Steering
F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F09 – – Not Used
F09 – 5 Amp Tan Transmission (Aisin)
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F14 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 115V
F15 – – Not Used
F15 – 10 Amp Red Transmission (Aisin)
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission Powertrain
F17 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F18 – 5 Amp Tan Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Anti-Lock Brake Valves
F30 – 5 Amp Tan After Run Pump
F81 70 Amp Tan – PTC (Secondary)
F82 40 Amp Orange – Transmission
F83 40 Amp Orange – PTC (Primary)
F84 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission
F85 – 15 Amp Blue Front Power Outlet 12V
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Mirrors
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
Interior Fuse Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
Cavity Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber Mini Fuse Description
1 F12 7.5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam
2 F32 7.5 Amp Brown Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and
Door Courtesy Lights
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber Mini Fuse Description
3 F53 7.5 Amp Brown Instrument Panel Node
4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking
5 F36 15 Amp Blue Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, Climate
Control System, TPMS, Sunroof
6 F90 7.5 Amp Brown Left High Beam
7 F91 7.5 Amp Brown Right High Beam
8 F92 7.5 Amp Brown Left Fog Light
9 F93 7.5 Amp Brown Right Fog Light
10 F42 5 Amp Tan BSM, ESP
11 F33 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Passenger Window
12 F34 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Passenger Window
13 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer
14 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
15 F13 7.5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling
16 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag
17 F51 5 Amp Tan Vehicle Radio Switch, Climate Control Sys-
tem, Stop Light, Reverse Gear, Sunroof,
Parking Sensor, Rear Camera
18 F37 7.5 Amp Brown Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
Cavity Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber Mini Fuse Description
19 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Park-
ing Sensor
20 F31 5 Amp Tan Climate Control, Seat Regulation
21 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
Rear Interior Fuses
The rear interior fuse panel is located on the driver’s
side in the rear compartment.
Cavity Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber Mini Fuse Description
1 F61 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Regulation Seats
2 F62 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats
Rear Fuse Panel
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber Mini Fuse Description
3 F64 20 Amp Yellow Hi Fi System
4 F65 20 Amp Yellow Sun Blind
5 F66 20 Amp Yellow Sunroof
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
•Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Proce-
dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Sun Visors C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Glove Compartment C5W
Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21/5W
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Tail Lamp LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamps P21W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See Authorized Dealer)
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
Rear Fog Lamps - If Equipped W16W
License Plate Lamps W5W
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmo-
spheric conditions change to allow the condensation to
change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will
usually accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam
1. Remove the plastic sealing cap from the back of the
headlamp housing by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise.
Headlamp Sealing Cap Removal
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
3. Remove the bulb when all the tabs are aligned with
the openings in the metal holder.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb.
5. Install the new bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
Bulb Removal Procedure Electrical Connector Removal
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime
Running Lamps
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access upper cover in
wheel liner.
2. Open the upper cover on the front of the wheel liner.
3. Remove the cap from the back of the lower headlamp
housing.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
5. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
New Bulb Installation Headlamp Sealing Cap Installation
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
6. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the
wheel liner.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized
dealer.
Front, Rear Roof Lamps
1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp assembly.
2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counterclock-
wise.
3. Remove bulb and replace as needed.
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise to lock
in place.
5. Reinstall lamp.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp access panel.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the tail lamp to
the body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the tail lamp assembly.
5. Remove the two screws that secure the backplate to
the tail lamp housing.
6. Separate the backplate from the tail lamp housing.
7. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by push-
ing them slightly and turning counterclockwise.
8. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight
out.
9. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized
dealer for replacement.
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 13.1 Gallons 50 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula).
6.1 Quarts 5.8 Liters
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-90032.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified
Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil Filter – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol.
CAUTION!
•Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally com-
patible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid
or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect
the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
If using DOT 4 brake fluid, the fluid must be changed
every 24 months. This interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............344 ▫Maintenance Chart ...................345
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument
cluster. This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-
trips, trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Change Oil” or
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe
operating conditions can cause the change oil message
to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indica-
tor message after completing the scheduled oil change.
If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone
other than your authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described under “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve
months, or 350 hours of engine run time: whichever
comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is
generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the
vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road environ-
ment, or is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is consid-
ered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•Check engine oil level.
•Check windshield washer fluid level.
•Check the tire inflation pressures and look for un-
usual wear or damage.
•Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
•Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
344 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
•Change oil and filter.
•Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals
as required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and
hoses.
•Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
•Check and adjust hand brake.
•Inspect exhaust system.
•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 345
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, and re-
place if necessary. XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, park-
ing brake function. XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace Brake Fluid every two
years. * XXX X X X X
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary. X
346 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace the timing belt. X
* The brake fluid change interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based
only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
•You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to
perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
•Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance.
This could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 347
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ......................350
▫Prepare For The Appointment............350
▫Prepare A List .......................350
▫Be Reasonable With Requests ............350
䡵IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............350
▫FIAT Customer Center .................351
▫FIAT Canada Customer Center ...........351
▫In Mexico Contact ....................351
▫Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands .......351
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)..................351
▫Service Contract .....................352
䡵WARRANTY INFORMATION ............352
䡵REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...........353
▫In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C......................353
▫In Canada..........................353
䡵PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...........353
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring
the right papers with you, as well as your warranty
folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the ser-
vice manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history, as this can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental,
it is advisable to make these arrangements when you
call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
•If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s cus-
tomer center.
350 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer
center should include the following information:
•Owner’s name and address
•Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•Authorized dealer name
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FIAT Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: 1-888-242-6342
FIAT Canada Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 351
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the
mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If
you have any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract.
It is not responsible for any service contract other than
the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service
contract, and you require service after the manufactur-
er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with
their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or
related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of com-
ponent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
352 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between you, your
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,
you should contact the Customer Service Depart-
ment immediately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian government
should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510
or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are
accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please
call for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 353
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the in-
formation that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightfor-
ward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manu-
als make it easy for students and technicians to find and
fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. In-
cluded are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
•Call toll free at:
•1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
•1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
•Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•www.techauthority.com
354 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........315
Adding Fuel............................269
Adding Washer Fluid .....................311
Additives, Fuel ..........................268
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ......................39
Driver Knee Air Bag .....................40
Enhanced Accident Response ..............295
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............295
If A Deployment Occurs ..................44
Knee Impact Bolsters ....................40
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ...........47
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ...........37
Side Air Bags ..........................40
Transporting Pets .......................64
Air Bag Light ........................67, 138
Air Bag Maintenance ......................47
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . .304
Air Conditioner Maintenance ................305
Air Conditioning Filter .................204, 306
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .............203
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............305, 306
Air Conditioning System................202, 305
Air Pressure, Tires........................250
Alarm (Security Alarm) .....................14
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............14
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ..............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..............314, 339
Capacities ...........................339
Disposal .............................316
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...............232
Appearance Care ........................320
Arming System (Security Alarm) ..............14
Audio Systems (Radio) ....................190
Automatic Dimming Mirror..................74
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........202
Automatic Transmission..........220, 221, 319, 320
Adding Fluid .........................320
Autostick ............................227
Fluid And Filter Changes .................320
Fluid Change .........................320
Fluid Level Check ......................320
Fluid Type ...........................341
Gear Ranges ..........................222
Special Additives ......................319
Autostick ..............................227
Auto Up Power Windows ...................22
Battery................................304
Jump Starting .........................286
356 INDEX
Belts, Seat ..............................66
Body Mechanism Lubrication................308
B-Pillar Location .........................244
Brake Assist System ......................233
Brake Fluid ............................341
Brake, Parking ..........................230
Brakes ................................318
Brake System ........................232, 318
Anti-Lock (ABS) .......................232
Master Cylinder .......................318
Parking .............................230
Warning Light ........................135
Brake/Transmission Interlock................221
Bulb Replacement.....................334, 335
Bulbs, Light..........................69, 334
Camera, Rear ...........................106
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .........339
Capacities, Fluid .........................339
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................294
Oil (Engine) ..........................303
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............66, 269
Car Washes ............................321
Cellular Phone ..........................192
Center High Mounted Stop Light .............338
Chains, Tire ............................259
Changing A Flat Tire ......................280
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................241
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............65
Checks, Safety ...........................65
Child Restraint ...........................48
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..........................52
Child Restraints ........................48
Child Seat Installation ....................61
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......59
Infants And Child Restraints ...............50
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ......54
Older Children And Child Restraints .........51
Seating Positions .......................5
3
Child Safety Locks ........................20
Cigar Lighter ...........................118
Clean Air Gasoline .......................266
Cleaning
Wheels .............................322
Windshield Wiper Blades .................309
Climate Control .........................193
Manual .............................193
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............192
10
INDEX 357
Compact Spare Tire.......................254
Connector
UCI................................190
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........190
Contract, Service.........................352
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................339
Cooling System..........................313
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............315
Coolant Level .....................314, 317
Disposal Of Used Coolant ................316
Drain, Flush, And Refill ..................314
Inspection ...........................317
Points To Remember .................316, 317
Pressure Cap .........................316
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........314
Corrosion Protection ......................320
Cruise Light ............................149
Cupholders ............................119
Customer Assistance ......................350
Daytime Running Lights ....................90
Dealer Service...........................301
Deck Lid, Emergency Release ................24
Defroster, Windshield ......................67
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................299
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission .................320
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............316
Door Locks .............................18
Door Opener, Garage .....................108
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ...............................229
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .......117
Electrical Power Outlets....................117
Electric Remote Mirrors.....................76
Electronic Brake Control System ..............232
Brake Assist System ....................233
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .............238
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........98
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .............235
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .......139
Emergency Deck Lid Release .................24
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher .................274
Jacking .............................280
Jump Starting .........................286
Towing .............................292
358 INDEX
Emergency Trunk Release ...................24
Engine
Air Cleaner ..........................304
Break-In Recommendations ................64
Checking Oil Level .....................302
Compartment .........................299
Cooling .............................313
Exhaust Gas Caution .................66, 269
Fails To Start .........................219
Flooded, Starting ......................219
Fuel Requirements .....................266
Oil .............................302, 339
Oil Filler Cap .........................303
Oil Filter ............................303
Oil Selection ..........................303
Overheating ..........................274
Starting .............................218
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........295
Ethanol ...............................267
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................66, 269
Exhaust System .......................66, 311
Exterior Lights ...........................69
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................304
Air Conditioning ...................204, 306
Engine Fuel ..........................339
Engine Oil ...........................303
Engine Oil Disposal ....................303
Flashers
Turn Signal ........................69, 148
Flooded Engine Starting ...................219
Fluid, Brake ............................341
Fluid Capacities .........................339
Fluid Leaks .............................69
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission .................320
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ..........339
Fog Lights ..............................92
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat ..................83
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ....................289
Fuel..................................266
Adding .............................269
Additives ............................268
Capacity ............................339
Clean Air ............................266
Ethanol .............................267
Gasoline ............................266
Light ...............................143
Materials Added .......................268
10
INDEX 359
Methanol ............................267
Octane Rating .........................266
Requirements .........................266
Tank Capacity ........................339
Fueling ...............................269
Fuses .................................327
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).............108
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................266
Gasoline (Fuel).......................266, 339
Gasoline, Reformulated.................266, 267
Gear Ranges ............................222
Gear Select Lever Override .................291
General Maintenance......................301
Glass Cleaning ..........................325
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ........................229
Headlights ..............................90
Cleaning ............................325
Passing ..............................91
Heated Mirrors...........................76
Hill Start Assist .........................234
Holder, Cup ............................119
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener).............108
Hood Release............................88
Ignition
Key.................................11
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................13
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................74
Instrument Cluster.................132, 137, 148
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display ...............150
Instrument Panel And Controls ..............131
Instrument Panel Cover....................325
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..............326
Interior Appearance Care...................324
Interior Lighting..........................92
Introduction .............................4
Jacking Instructions.......................282
Jack Location ...........................280
Jack Operation .......................280, 282
Jump Starting ...........................286
Key-In Reminder .........................13
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors .................182
360 INDEX
Passive Entry Programming ...............182
Unlock Liftgate ........................182
Key, Replacement .........................13
Keys ..................................11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................13
Lane Change Assist .......................91
Lap/Shoulder Belts........................28
Latches ................................69
Lead Free Gasoline .......................266
Leaks, Fluid .............................69
Life Of Tires ............................257
Liftgate (Sedan) ..........................23
Light Bulbs ..........................69, 334
Lighter, Cigar ...........................118
Lights ............................69, 89, 90
AirBag...........................67, 138
Brake Assist Warning ...................236
Brake Warning ........................135
Bulb Replacement ......................335
Center Mounted Stop ...................338
Cruise ..............................149
Engine Temperature Warning ..............137
Exterior ..............................69
Low Fuel ............................143
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........144
Park .............................91, 148
Passing ..............................91
Seat Belt Reminder .....................137
Security Alarm .........................14
Service ..............................335
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........145
Traction Control .......................236
Turn Signal ........................69, 148
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . .137, 148
Loading Vehicle
Tires ...............................244
Locks
Child Protection ........................20
Door ................................18
Lubrication, Body ........................308
Lug Nuts ..............................275
Maintenance Free Battery...................304
Maintenance, General .....................301
Maintenance Procedures ...................301
Maintenance Schedule .....................344
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....144
Manual, Service .........................353
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ...................318
10
INDEX 361
Methanol ..............................267
Mirrors ................................74
Automatic Dimming .....................74
Electric Powered .......................76
Electric Remote ........................76
Heated ..............................76
Rearview .............................74
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ..............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............262
MTBE/ETBE ...........................267
Multi-Function Control Lever ................90
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................64
Occupant Restraints .......................25
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ...............266
Oil Change Indicator......................152
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .................152
Oil, Engine .........................302, 339
Capacity ............................339
Change Interval .......................302
Checking ............................302
Disposal .............................303
Filter ...............................303
Filter Disposal ........................303
Materials Added To ....................303
Pressure Warning Light ..................138
Recommendation ...................303, 339
Viscosity ............................303
Oil Filter, Change ........................303
Oil Filter, Selection .......................304
Oil Pressure Light ........................138
Onboard Diagnostic System .................299
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) ............108
Operating Precautions .....................299
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Overheating, Engine ......................274
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........4,353
Paint Care .............................320
Parking Brake...........................230
ParkSense System, Rear ....................102
Passing Light ............................91
Pets...................................64
Placard, Tire And Loading Information......244, 246
Power
Mirrors ..............................76
Sunroof .............................115
Windows .............................21
Power Steering Fluid......................341
362 INDEX
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ..............32
Preparation For Jacking ....................281
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................33
Radial Ply Tires .........................251
Radio Frequency
General Information ..................14, 18
Radio Operation .........................192
Rear Camera ...........................106
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) ......................23
Rear Window Features ....................126
Reclining Rear Seats .......................82
Recreational Towing ......................272
Reformulated Gasoline ....................266
Refrigerant .............................306
Reminder, Seat Belt........................27
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........191
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . .184
Uconnect Settings ......................184
Replacement Bulbs .......................334
Replacement Keys ........................13
Replacement Parts........................301
Replacement Tires ........................258
Reporting Safety Defects ...................353
Restraints, Child..........................48
Rotation, Tires ..........................260
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................66
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................68
Safety Defects, Reporting ...................353
Safety, Exhaust Gas........................66
Safety Information, Tire ....................240
Safety Tips ..............................65
Schedule, Maintenance ....................344
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ..........33
Energy Management Feature ...............33
Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................28
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ..............32
Pregnant Women .......................32
Seat Belt Pretensioner ....................33
Seat Belt Reminder ......................27
Seat Belt Maintenance .....................326
Seat Belt Reminder ........................27
Seat Belts ............................26, 66
Child Restraint .........................48
Front Seat .......................26, 28, 30
Inspection ............................66
10
INDEX 363
Operating Instructions ...................30
Pregnant Women .......................32
Pretensioners ..........................33
Rear Seat .............................28
Reminder ............................137
Untwisting Procedure ....................32
Seats
Fold And Tumble Rear ...................83
Reclining .............................79
Security Alarm ...........................14
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................13
Service Assistance ........................350
Service Contract .........................352
Service Manuals .........................353
Shift Lever Override ......................291
Shoulder Belts ...........................28
Signals, Turn .........................69, 148
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)..................259
Snow Tires .............................253
Spare Tire....................253, 254, 255, 256
Spark Plugs ............................339
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ..........................101
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...............98
Starting ...............................218
Automatic Transmission .................218
Cold Weather .........................218
Engine Fails To Start ....................219
Steering
Tilt Column ...........................98
Wheel, Tilt ............................98
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..............191
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . .191
Storage ...............................333
Storage, Vehicle .........................204
Stuck, Freeing...........................289
Sun Roof ..............................115
Sun Visor Extension .......................77
Telescoping Steering Column .................98
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .........202
Tilt Steering Column.......................98
Tire And Loading Information Placard ......244, 246
Tire Markings ...........................240
Tir
es.....................68, 249, 253, 254, 260
Aging (Life Of Tires) ....................257
Air Pressure .......................244, 249
Chains ..............................259
Changing ............................280
Compact Spare ........................254
364 INDEX
General Information ..............249, 253, 254
High Speed ..........................251
Inflation Pressures .....................250
Jacking .............................280
Life Of Tires ..........................257
Load Capacity .....................244, 246
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........262
Pressure Warning Light ..................145
Quality Grading .......................260
Radial ..............................251
Replacement ..........................258
Rotation .............................260
Safety ...........................240, 249
Sizes ...............................241
Snow Tires ...........................253
Spare Tire ..................253, 254, 255, 256
Spinning ............................256
Tread Wear Indicators ...................256
Tire Safety Information ....................240
Towing ...............................271
Disabled Vehicle .......................292
Recreational ..........................272
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ..........272
Traction ...............................228
Traction Control .........................234
Trailer Towing ..........................271
Transmission
Automatic .....................220, 221, 319
Fluid ...............................319
Maintenance ..........................319
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . .108
Transporting Pets .........................64
Tread Wear Indicators .....................256
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ......................24
Trunk Release, Emergency ...................24
Turn Signals ............................148
UCI Connector ..........................190
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features ..........184
Uconnect Settings ......................184
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ..........182
Passive Entry Programming ...............182
Uconnect Settings ......................182
Uconnect Voice Command ..................206
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................260
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . .190
Universal Transmitter .....................108
Unleaded Gasoline .......................266
10
INDEX 365
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...............32
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading .........................246
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) .........14
Vehicle Storage.......................204, 333
Warnings And Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information ...................4,352
Washer
Adding Fluid .........................311
Washers, Windshield.......................94
Washing Vehicle .........................321
Water
Driving Through .......................229
Wheel And Wheel Trim ....................322
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ................322
Wind Buffeting .......................23, 116
Window Fogging ........................204
Windows ...............................21
Power ...............................21
Windshield Defroster ......................67
Windshield Washers .......................94
Windshield Wiper Blades...................309
Windshield Wipers ........................94
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................309
366 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017
2017 FIAT® 500L
First Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
17BF-126-AA
FIAT® 500L
16BF-126-AB
Second Edition

Navigation menu